Upload
umasankar-reddy-g
View
22
Download
1
Embed Size (px)
DESCRIPTION
CRM Overview Document
Citation preview
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
SAP CRM Overview ndash Architecture
Module [1] CRM Functional Overview
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 2
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Customer centric E-Business with MySAPCRM
Todayrsquos complex customer problems require a deployable customer relationship management (CRM) application that can directly address specific challenges regardless of where or when they occur in the cycle of interacting with selling to and servicing an organizationrsquos customers
mySAP CRM combines extensive functional capabilities in the core areas of marketing sales and service with award-winning analytics that are directly built in to the primary interaction channels used by organizations when interacting with their customers
All this functionality enables the closed-loop interaction cycle underlying mySAP CRMrsquos unique value propositions
mySAP CRM is built on an open reliable secure and scalable technology platform
The comprehensive range of services offered by SAP help to ensure quick implementation of mySAP CRM and support the ongoing optimization of the application environment
SAP AG 2004
Customer Centric E-Business with mySAP CRM
A Complete ApplicationComprehensive and Supporting Functions
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 3
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
CRM Architectural Concept
SAP AG2004
Mobile Clients
E-CommerceAs
a logical unit
SAP R3SAP ECC
SAPNetWeaver
Portal
TelephonyE-Mail
SAP CRM
mySAP CRM Architectural Concept
Handhelds
SAP SCM
SAP BW
SAPNetWeaver
BI
InteractionCenter
J 2EE IMS
FieldApplications
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 4
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
mySAP Customer Relationship Management (mySAP CRM) is a part of the mySAP Business Suite and contains a central CRM server which can access the system by means of various channels Additionally the CRM server can connect to other systems The following functions are supported in mySAP CRM
Interaction Center The integrated Interaction Center enables customers to use phone fax or e-mail to contact sales or service representatives
Internet access Users can configure and order products or services using the Internet components of mySAP CRM
Mobile clients and handheld devices The mobile sales force or mobile service engineers can connect to the SAP CRM system from their laptop computers or other mobile terminals to exchange the latest information with the central CRM server
The mySAP CRM application offers you the following fully integrated connections
The SAP CRM System as a central CRM server with its application components
SAP ERP Central Component as a back-end system with proven ERP functions
BI functions of SAP NetWeaver with comprehensive statistical and analysis capabilities
The SAP system as a global Available-to-Promise (ATP) check and demand planning solution
The SAP NetWeaver Portal as a tool that provides you with integrated access to all systems
CRM Architectural Concept
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 5
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Integration with other systems
ndash Data is exchanged between the CRM system and a connected ERP system (SAP R3 Release 31I and higher) mainly by means of the CRM middleware A plug-in installed on the ERP system acts as a counterpart to the R3 adapter supporting the data communication between the two systems The data exchange includes an initial transfer of customizing data master data and transaction data to the CRM system as well as delta data in both directions
SAP AG 2004
SAP CRM and Other SAP Systems
Plug-InR3 Adapter
ERP
CRM Middleware
BW Adapter
CRM Enterprise
SAPSCM
SAPBW
SAP CRM
depends on release
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 6
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structures of Business Transactions on SAP GUI
The screenshot shows the typical User Interface (UI) of a transaction in the ldquoSalesrdquo area
SAP AG 2004
Structure of Business Transactions on SAP GUI
Locator Work Area
Toolbar
Item list
Item details
Header details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
SAP CRM Overview ndash Master Data
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 8
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Module Objectives At the completion of this module you should be able to
ndash Explain CRM Master and Transaction Data
ndash Organizational Data -
Objects and Features
Explain Org Model scenarios and attributes
Organizational Data Determination
ndash Business Partner
Category
Relationship
Roles
Extension
ndash Product
Type
Hierarchies
Relationship
Extension
Exchange of Product between R3 and CRM
ndash Partner Product Range
ndash Maintain products and enhance products in CRM
ndash Explain product hierarchies and categories
ndash Understand product data exchange between CRM and R3 backend
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 9
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Master data in SAP CRM
Master Data Transaction
Organizational Data PPOSA_CRMPPOMA_CRM
Business Partner and Hierarchy BP BPH
Product and Hierarchy COMMPR01 COMM_HIERARCHY
Partner Product Range CRMM_PPR
Pricing and Condition SAPCNDGCM
Price List BEACNPL02
Commodity Pricing CRMM_FA_GCM
Content Management CRM_KW
Payment Card PCA
Installed Base IB52
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 10
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Transaction Data
Transactional Data Transaction
Activities CRMD_BUS2000126
Marketing CRM_MKTPL
Leads CRMD_BUS2000108
Opportunities CRMD_BUS2000111
Sales Contract CRMD_BUS2000121
Sales Order CRMD_BUS2000115
Service Process CRMD_BUS2000116
Service Confirmation CRMD_BUS2000117
Service Contract CRMD_BUS2000112
Complaints CRMD_BUS2000120
Billing Document BEA_BD_01
Sales and Service Quotation Contract Order Service Confirmation
CRMD_ORDERCIC0
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Organizational Data
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 12
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Data ndash Objects and Feature Organizational data defines the companyrsquos functional organizational structure in CRM
Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational data is comprised of 2 objects namely
ndash Organizational Unit ndash Functional Unit of the organization like Departments groups project teams
ndash Positions ndash The performer of the task like Sales Manager
Feature of Organizational data
ndash Flexible The organizational units are not already specified you can make your own units or leave some units out
ndash Time dependent This enables you to plan organizational changes in the future you can maintain different organizational structures for different time periods in parallel that means you can plan changes in future
ndash Adaptable and extendable you can maintain and change the organizational plan at any time without making changes in Customizing
ndash One structure for sales and service This can be changed just by activation An organizational unit can be a sales organization and service organization at the same time Scenario-specific data in the structure is assigned to the organizational units with attributes
ndash Organizational units can take the role of a business partner
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams
Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India
Org Unit
India South
Office Chennai
Sales org
Sales office
Positions
Emp group 1
Test lead
Ram Sharma
Position
Holder
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational scenarios
Sales Org Service Marketing
Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid
In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario
You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Attributes
They are used to define the type of an organizational unit
For example
Sales Organization
Sales Office
Sales Group
Service Organization
They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit
For example
Country
Division
Distribution Channel
Postal Code
Organizational Attributes General Attributes
Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining
organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type
ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document
ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Settings for organizational data at item level
Organizational data at Item level
Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product
With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header
There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)
Settings in customizing
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Business Partner
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Category
Person GroupOrganization
A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range
Can be External or Internal
Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings
BP Roles
A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data
Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once
1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc
Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship
Organization Person
Has contact person
Is contact person of
Relationship Attributes
Communication data
Function Department
Employeeresponsible
Can be time dependent
A business partner relationship represents the business connection between
two business partners
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners
Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners
The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role
A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories
In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round
In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
One way BP relationship Category
ndash Eg Is employee of
ndash Eg Has employer
Undirected BP relationship categories
ndash Eg Is married to
Configuration
ndash Extend and define relationship categories
ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extensibility
Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes
Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)
Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname
Extension of the relationships by adding attributes
You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships
ndash Is a member of (club)
ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)
ndash Is the sondaughter of
Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 2
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Customer centric E-Business with MySAPCRM
Todayrsquos complex customer problems require a deployable customer relationship management (CRM) application that can directly address specific challenges regardless of where or when they occur in the cycle of interacting with selling to and servicing an organizationrsquos customers
mySAP CRM combines extensive functional capabilities in the core areas of marketing sales and service with award-winning analytics that are directly built in to the primary interaction channels used by organizations when interacting with their customers
All this functionality enables the closed-loop interaction cycle underlying mySAP CRMrsquos unique value propositions
mySAP CRM is built on an open reliable secure and scalable technology platform
The comprehensive range of services offered by SAP help to ensure quick implementation of mySAP CRM and support the ongoing optimization of the application environment
SAP AG 2004
Customer Centric E-Business with mySAP CRM
A Complete ApplicationComprehensive and Supporting Functions
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 3
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
CRM Architectural Concept
SAP AG2004
Mobile Clients
E-CommerceAs
a logical unit
SAP R3SAP ECC
SAPNetWeaver
Portal
TelephonyE-Mail
SAP CRM
mySAP CRM Architectural Concept
Handhelds
SAP SCM
SAP BW
SAPNetWeaver
BI
InteractionCenter
J 2EE IMS
FieldApplications
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 4
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
mySAP Customer Relationship Management (mySAP CRM) is a part of the mySAP Business Suite and contains a central CRM server which can access the system by means of various channels Additionally the CRM server can connect to other systems The following functions are supported in mySAP CRM
Interaction Center The integrated Interaction Center enables customers to use phone fax or e-mail to contact sales or service representatives
Internet access Users can configure and order products or services using the Internet components of mySAP CRM
Mobile clients and handheld devices The mobile sales force or mobile service engineers can connect to the SAP CRM system from their laptop computers or other mobile terminals to exchange the latest information with the central CRM server
The mySAP CRM application offers you the following fully integrated connections
The SAP CRM System as a central CRM server with its application components
SAP ERP Central Component as a back-end system with proven ERP functions
BI functions of SAP NetWeaver with comprehensive statistical and analysis capabilities
The SAP system as a global Available-to-Promise (ATP) check and demand planning solution
The SAP NetWeaver Portal as a tool that provides you with integrated access to all systems
CRM Architectural Concept
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 5
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Integration with other systems
ndash Data is exchanged between the CRM system and a connected ERP system (SAP R3 Release 31I and higher) mainly by means of the CRM middleware A plug-in installed on the ERP system acts as a counterpart to the R3 adapter supporting the data communication between the two systems The data exchange includes an initial transfer of customizing data master data and transaction data to the CRM system as well as delta data in both directions
SAP AG 2004
SAP CRM and Other SAP Systems
Plug-InR3 Adapter
ERP
CRM Middleware
BW Adapter
CRM Enterprise
SAPSCM
SAPBW
SAP CRM
depends on release
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 6
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structures of Business Transactions on SAP GUI
The screenshot shows the typical User Interface (UI) of a transaction in the ldquoSalesrdquo area
SAP AG 2004
Structure of Business Transactions on SAP GUI
Locator Work Area
Toolbar
Item list
Item details
Header details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
SAP CRM Overview ndash Master Data
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 8
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Module Objectives At the completion of this module you should be able to
ndash Explain CRM Master and Transaction Data
ndash Organizational Data -
Objects and Features
Explain Org Model scenarios and attributes
Organizational Data Determination
ndash Business Partner
Category
Relationship
Roles
Extension
ndash Product
Type
Hierarchies
Relationship
Extension
Exchange of Product between R3 and CRM
ndash Partner Product Range
ndash Maintain products and enhance products in CRM
ndash Explain product hierarchies and categories
ndash Understand product data exchange between CRM and R3 backend
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 9
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Master data in SAP CRM
Master Data Transaction
Organizational Data PPOSA_CRMPPOMA_CRM
Business Partner and Hierarchy BP BPH
Product and Hierarchy COMMPR01 COMM_HIERARCHY
Partner Product Range CRMM_PPR
Pricing and Condition SAPCNDGCM
Price List BEACNPL02
Commodity Pricing CRMM_FA_GCM
Content Management CRM_KW
Payment Card PCA
Installed Base IB52
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 10
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Transaction Data
Transactional Data Transaction
Activities CRMD_BUS2000126
Marketing CRM_MKTPL
Leads CRMD_BUS2000108
Opportunities CRMD_BUS2000111
Sales Contract CRMD_BUS2000121
Sales Order CRMD_BUS2000115
Service Process CRMD_BUS2000116
Service Confirmation CRMD_BUS2000117
Service Contract CRMD_BUS2000112
Complaints CRMD_BUS2000120
Billing Document BEA_BD_01
Sales and Service Quotation Contract Order Service Confirmation
CRMD_ORDERCIC0
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Organizational Data
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 12
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Data ndash Objects and Feature Organizational data defines the companyrsquos functional organizational structure in CRM
Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational data is comprised of 2 objects namely
ndash Organizational Unit ndash Functional Unit of the organization like Departments groups project teams
ndash Positions ndash The performer of the task like Sales Manager
Feature of Organizational data
ndash Flexible The organizational units are not already specified you can make your own units or leave some units out
ndash Time dependent This enables you to plan organizational changes in the future you can maintain different organizational structures for different time periods in parallel that means you can plan changes in future
ndash Adaptable and extendable you can maintain and change the organizational plan at any time without making changes in Customizing
ndash One structure for sales and service This can be changed just by activation An organizational unit can be a sales organization and service organization at the same time Scenario-specific data in the structure is assigned to the organizational units with attributes
ndash Organizational units can take the role of a business partner
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams
Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India
Org Unit
India South
Office Chennai
Sales org
Sales office
Positions
Emp group 1
Test lead
Ram Sharma
Position
Holder
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational scenarios
Sales Org Service Marketing
Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid
In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario
You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Attributes
They are used to define the type of an organizational unit
For example
Sales Organization
Sales Office
Sales Group
Service Organization
They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit
For example
Country
Division
Distribution Channel
Postal Code
Organizational Attributes General Attributes
Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining
organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type
ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document
ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Settings for organizational data at item level
Organizational data at Item level
Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product
With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header
There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)
Settings in customizing
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Business Partner
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Category
Person GroupOrganization
A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range
Can be External or Internal
Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings
BP Roles
A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data
Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once
1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc
Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship
Organization Person
Has contact person
Is contact person of
Relationship Attributes
Communication data
Function Department
Employeeresponsible
Can be time dependent
A business partner relationship represents the business connection between
two business partners
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners
Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners
The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role
A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories
In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round
In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
One way BP relationship Category
ndash Eg Is employee of
ndash Eg Has employer
Undirected BP relationship categories
ndash Eg Is married to
Configuration
ndash Extend and define relationship categories
ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extensibility
Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes
Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)
Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname
Extension of the relationships by adding attributes
You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships
ndash Is a member of (club)
ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)
ndash Is the sondaughter of
Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 3
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
CRM Architectural Concept
SAP AG2004
Mobile Clients
E-CommerceAs
a logical unit
SAP R3SAP ECC
SAPNetWeaver
Portal
TelephonyE-Mail
SAP CRM
mySAP CRM Architectural Concept
Handhelds
SAP SCM
SAP BW
SAPNetWeaver
BI
InteractionCenter
J 2EE IMS
FieldApplications
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 4
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
mySAP Customer Relationship Management (mySAP CRM) is a part of the mySAP Business Suite and contains a central CRM server which can access the system by means of various channels Additionally the CRM server can connect to other systems The following functions are supported in mySAP CRM
Interaction Center The integrated Interaction Center enables customers to use phone fax or e-mail to contact sales or service representatives
Internet access Users can configure and order products or services using the Internet components of mySAP CRM
Mobile clients and handheld devices The mobile sales force or mobile service engineers can connect to the SAP CRM system from their laptop computers or other mobile terminals to exchange the latest information with the central CRM server
The mySAP CRM application offers you the following fully integrated connections
The SAP CRM System as a central CRM server with its application components
SAP ERP Central Component as a back-end system with proven ERP functions
BI functions of SAP NetWeaver with comprehensive statistical and analysis capabilities
The SAP system as a global Available-to-Promise (ATP) check and demand planning solution
The SAP NetWeaver Portal as a tool that provides you with integrated access to all systems
CRM Architectural Concept
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 5
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Integration with other systems
ndash Data is exchanged between the CRM system and a connected ERP system (SAP R3 Release 31I and higher) mainly by means of the CRM middleware A plug-in installed on the ERP system acts as a counterpart to the R3 adapter supporting the data communication between the two systems The data exchange includes an initial transfer of customizing data master data and transaction data to the CRM system as well as delta data in both directions
SAP AG 2004
SAP CRM and Other SAP Systems
Plug-InR3 Adapter
ERP
CRM Middleware
BW Adapter
CRM Enterprise
SAPSCM
SAPBW
SAP CRM
depends on release
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 6
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structures of Business Transactions on SAP GUI
The screenshot shows the typical User Interface (UI) of a transaction in the ldquoSalesrdquo area
SAP AG 2004
Structure of Business Transactions on SAP GUI
Locator Work Area
Toolbar
Item list
Item details
Header details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
SAP CRM Overview ndash Master Data
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 8
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Module Objectives At the completion of this module you should be able to
ndash Explain CRM Master and Transaction Data
ndash Organizational Data -
Objects and Features
Explain Org Model scenarios and attributes
Organizational Data Determination
ndash Business Partner
Category
Relationship
Roles
Extension
ndash Product
Type
Hierarchies
Relationship
Extension
Exchange of Product between R3 and CRM
ndash Partner Product Range
ndash Maintain products and enhance products in CRM
ndash Explain product hierarchies and categories
ndash Understand product data exchange between CRM and R3 backend
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 9
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Master data in SAP CRM
Master Data Transaction
Organizational Data PPOSA_CRMPPOMA_CRM
Business Partner and Hierarchy BP BPH
Product and Hierarchy COMMPR01 COMM_HIERARCHY
Partner Product Range CRMM_PPR
Pricing and Condition SAPCNDGCM
Price List BEACNPL02
Commodity Pricing CRMM_FA_GCM
Content Management CRM_KW
Payment Card PCA
Installed Base IB52
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 10
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Transaction Data
Transactional Data Transaction
Activities CRMD_BUS2000126
Marketing CRM_MKTPL
Leads CRMD_BUS2000108
Opportunities CRMD_BUS2000111
Sales Contract CRMD_BUS2000121
Sales Order CRMD_BUS2000115
Service Process CRMD_BUS2000116
Service Confirmation CRMD_BUS2000117
Service Contract CRMD_BUS2000112
Complaints CRMD_BUS2000120
Billing Document BEA_BD_01
Sales and Service Quotation Contract Order Service Confirmation
CRMD_ORDERCIC0
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Organizational Data
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 12
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Data ndash Objects and Feature Organizational data defines the companyrsquos functional organizational structure in CRM
Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational data is comprised of 2 objects namely
ndash Organizational Unit ndash Functional Unit of the organization like Departments groups project teams
ndash Positions ndash The performer of the task like Sales Manager
Feature of Organizational data
ndash Flexible The organizational units are not already specified you can make your own units or leave some units out
ndash Time dependent This enables you to plan organizational changes in the future you can maintain different organizational structures for different time periods in parallel that means you can plan changes in future
ndash Adaptable and extendable you can maintain and change the organizational plan at any time without making changes in Customizing
ndash One structure for sales and service This can be changed just by activation An organizational unit can be a sales organization and service organization at the same time Scenario-specific data in the structure is assigned to the organizational units with attributes
ndash Organizational units can take the role of a business partner
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams
Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India
Org Unit
India South
Office Chennai
Sales org
Sales office
Positions
Emp group 1
Test lead
Ram Sharma
Position
Holder
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational scenarios
Sales Org Service Marketing
Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid
In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario
You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Attributes
They are used to define the type of an organizational unit
For example
Sales Organization
Sales Office
Sales Group
Service Organization
They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit
For example
Country
Division
Distribution Channel
Postal Code
Organizational Attributes General Attributes
Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining
organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type
ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document
ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Settings for organizational data at item level
Organizational data at Item level
Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product
With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header
There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)
Settings in customizing
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Business Partner
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Category
Person GroupOrganization
A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range
Can be External or Internal
Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings
BP Roles
A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data
Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once
1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc
Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship
Organization Person
Has contact person
Is contact person of
Relationship Attributes
Communication data
Function Department
Employeeresponsible
Can be time dependent
A business partner relationship represents the business connection between
two business partners
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners
Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners
The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role
A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories
In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round
In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
One way BP relationship Category
ndash Eg Is employee of
ndash Eg Has employer
Undirected BP relationship categories
ndash Eg Is married to
Configuration
ndash Extend and define relationship categories
ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extensibility
Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes
Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)
Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname
Extension of the relationships by adding attributes
You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships
ndash Is a member of (club)
ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)
ndash Is the sondaughter of
Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 4
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
mySAP Customer Relationship Management (mySAP CRM) is a part of the mySAP Business Suite and contains a central CRM server which can access the system by means of various channels Additionally the CRM server can connect to other systems The following functions are supported in mySAP CRM
Interaction Center The integrated Interaction Center enables customers to use phone fax or e-mail to contact sales or service representatives
Internet access Users can configure and order products or services using the Internet components of mySAP CRM
Mobile clients and handheld devices The mobile sales force or mobile service engineers can connect to the SAP CRM system from their laptop computers or other mobile terminals to exchange the latest information with the central CRM server
The mySAP CRM application offers you the following fully integrated connections
The SAP CRM System as a central CRM server with its application components
SAP ERP Central Component as a back-end system with proven ERP functions
BI functions of SAP NetWeaver with comprehensive statistical and analysis capabilities
The SAP system as a global Available-to-Promise (ATP) check and demand planning solution
The SAP NetWeaver Portal as a tool that provides you with integrated access to all systems
CRM Architectural Concept
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 5
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Integration with other systems
ndash Data is exchanged between the CRM system and a connected ERP system (SAP R3 Release 31I and higher) mainly by means of the CRM middleware A plug-in installed on the ERP system acts as a counterpart to the R3 adapter supporting the data communication between the two systems The data exchange includes an initial transfer of customizing data master data and transaction data to the CRM system as well as delta data in both directions
SAP AG 2004
SAP CRM and Other SAP Systems
Plug-InR3 Adapter
ERP
CRM Middleware
BW Adapter
CRM Enterprise
SAPSCM
SAPBW
SAP CRM
depends on release
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 6
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structures of Business Transactions on SAP GUI
The screenshot shows the typical User Interface (UI) of a transaction in the ldquoSalesrdquo area
SAP AG 2004
Structure of Business Transactions on SAP GUI
Locator Work Area
Toolbar
Item list
Item details
Header details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
SAP CRM Overview ndash Master Data
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 8
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Module Objectives At the completion of this module you should be able to
ndash Explain CRM Master and Transaction Data
ndash Organizational Data -
Objects and Features
Explain Org Model scenarios and attributes
Organizational Data Determination
ndash Business Partner
Category
Relationship
Roles
Extension
ndash Product
Type
Hierarchies
Relationship
Extension
Exchange of Product between R3 and CRM
ndash Partner Product Range
ndash Maintain products and enhance products in CRM
ndash Explain product hierarchies and categories
ndash Understand product data exchange between CRM and R3 backend
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 9
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Master data in SAP CRM
Master Data Transaction
Organizational Data PPOSA_CRMPPOMA_CRM
Business Partner and Hierarchy BP BPH
Product and Hierarchy COMMPR01 COMM_HIERARCHY
Partner Product Range CRMM_PPR
Pricing and Condition SAPCNDGCM
Price List BEACNPL02
Commodity Pricing CRMM_FA_GCM
Content Management CRM_KW
Payment Card PCA
Installed Base IB52
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 10
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Transaction Data
Transactional Data Transaction
Activities CRMD_BUS2000126
Marketing CRM_MKTPL
Leads CRMD_BUS2000108
Opportunities CRMD_BUS2000111
Sales Contract CRMD_BUS2000121
Sales Order CRMD_BUS2000115
Service Process CRMD_BUS2000116
Service Confirmation CRMD_BUS2000117
Service Contract CRMD_BUS2000112
Complaints CRMD_BUS2000120
Billing Document BEA_BD_01
Sales and Service Quotation Contract Order Service Confirmation
CRMD_ORDERCIC0
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Organizational Data
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 12
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Data ndash Objects and Feature Organizational data defines the companyrsquos functional organizational structure in CRM
Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational data is comprised of 2 objects namely
ndash Organizational Unit ndash Functional Unit of the organization like Departments groups project teams
ndash Positions ndash The performer of the task like Sales Manager
Feature of Organizational data
ndash Flexible The organizational units are not already specified you can make your own units or leave some units out
ndash Time dependent This enables you to plan organizational changes in the future you can maintain different organizational structures for different time periods in parallel that means you can plan changes in future
ndash Adaptable and extendable you can maintain and change the organizational plan at any time without making changes in Customizing
ndash One structure for sales and service This can be changed just by activation An organizational unit can be a sales organization and service organization at the same time Scenario-specific data in the structure is assigned to the organizational units with attributes
ndash Organizational units can take the role of a business partner
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams
Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India
Org Unit
India South
Office Chennai
Sales org
Sales office
Positions
Emp group 1
Test lead
Ram Sharma
Position
Holder
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational scenarios
Sales Org Service Marketing
Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid
In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario
You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Attributes
They are used to define the type of an organizational unit
For example
Sales Organization
Sales Office
Sales Group
Service Organization
They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit
For example
Country
Division
Distribution Channel
Postal Code
Organizational Attributes General Attributes
Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining
organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type
ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document
ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Settings for organizational data at item level
Organizational data at Item level
Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product
With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header
There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)
Settings in customizing
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Business Partner
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Category
Person GroupOrganization
A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range
Can be External or Internal
Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings
BP Roles
A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data
Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once
1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc
Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship
Organization Person
Has contact person
Is contact person of
Relationship Attributes
Communication data
Function Department
Employeeresponsible
Can be time dependent
A business partner relationship represents the business connection between
two business partners
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners
Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners
The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role
A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories
In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round
In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
One way BP relationship Category
ndash Eg Is employee of
ndash Eg Has employer
Undirected BP relationship categories
ndash Eg Is married to
Configuration
ndash Extend and define relationship categories
ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extensibility
Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes
Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)
Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname
Extension of the relationships by adding attributes
You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships
ndash Is a member of (club)
ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)
ndash Is the sondaughter of
Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 5
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Integration with other systems
ndash Data is exchanged between the CRM system and a connected ERP system (SAP R3 Release 31I and higher) mainly by means of the CRM middleware A plug-in installed on the ERP system acts as a counterpart to the R3 adapter supporting the data communication between the two systems The data exchange includes an initial transfer of customizing data master data and transaction data to the CRM system as well as delta data in both directions
SAP AG 2004
SAP CRM and Other SAP Systems
Plug-InR3 Adapter
ERP
CRM Middleware
BW Adapter
CRM Enterprise
SAPSCM
SAPBW
SAP CRM
depends on release
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 6
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structures of Business Transactions on SAP GUI
The screenshot shows the typical User Interface (UI) of a transaction in the ldquoSalesrdquo area
SAP AG 2004
Structure of Business Transactions on SAP GUI
Locator Work Area
Toolbar
Item list
Item details
Header details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
SAP CRM Overview ndash Master Data
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 8
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Module Objectives At the completion of this module you should be able to
ndash Explain CRM Master and Transaction Data
ndash Organizational Data -
Objects and Features
Explain Org Model scenarios and attributes
Organizational Data Determination
ndash Business Partner
Category
Relationship
Roles
Extension
ndash Product
Type
Hierarchies
Relationship
Extension
Exchange of Product between R3 and CRM
ndash Partner Product Range
ndash Maintain products and enhance products in CRM
ndash Explain product hierarchies and categories
ndash Understand product data exchange between CRM and R3 backend
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 9
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Master data in SAP CRM
Master Data Transaction
Organizational Data PPOSA_CRMPPOMA_CRM
Business Partner and Hierarchy BP BPH
Product and Hierarchy COMMPR01 COMM_HIERARCHY
Partner Product Range CRMM_PPR
Pricing and Condition SAPCNDGCM
Price List BEACNPL02
Commodity Pricing CRMM_FA_GCM
Content Management CRM_KW
Payment Card PCA
Installed Base IB52
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 10
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Transaction Data
Transactional Data Transaction
Activities CRMD_BUS2000126
Marketing CRM_MKTPL
Leads CRMD_BUS2000108
Opportunities CRMD_BUS2000111
Sales Contract CRMD_BUS2000121
Sales Order CRMD_BUS2000115
Service Process CRMD_BUS2000116
Service Confirmation CRMD_BUS2000117
Service Contract CRMD_BUS2000112
Complaints CRMD_BUS2000120
Billing Document BEA_BD_01
Sales and Service Quotation Contract Order Service Confirmation
CRMD_ORDERCIC0
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Organizational Data
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 12
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Data ndash Objects and Feature Organizational data defines the companyrsquos functional organizational structure in CRM
Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational data is comprised of 2 objects namely
ndash Organizational Unit ndash Functional Unit of the organization like Departments groups project teams
ndash Positions ndash The performer of the task like Sales Manager
Feature of Organizational data
ndash Flexible The organizational units are not already specified you can make your own units or leave some units out
ndash Time dependent This enables you to plan organizational changes in the future you can maintain different organizational structures for different time periods in parallel that means you can plan changes in future
ndash Adaptable and extendable you can maintain and change the organizational plan at any time without making changes in Customizing
ndash One structure for sales and service This can be changed just by activation An organizational unit can be a sales organization and service organization at the same time Scenario-specific data in the structure is assigned to the organizational units with attributes
ndash Organizational units can take the role of a business partner
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams
Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India
Org Unit
India South
Office Chennai
Sales org
Sales office
Positions
Emp group 1
Test lead
Ram Sharma
Position
Holder
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational scenarios
Sales Org Service Marketing
Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid
In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario
You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Attributes
They are used to define the type of an organizational unit
For example
Sales Organization
Sales Office
Sales Group
Service Organization
They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit
For example
Country
Division
Distribution Channel
Postal Code
Organizational Attributes General Attributes
Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining
organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type
ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document
ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Settings for organizational data at item level
Organizational data at Item level
Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product
With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header
There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)
Settings in customizing
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Business Partner
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Category
Person GroupOrganization
A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range
Can be External or Internal
Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings
BP Roles
A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data
Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once
1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc
Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship
Organization Person
Has contact person
Is contact person of
Relationship Attributes
Communication data
Function Department
Employeeresponsible
Can be time dependent
A business partner relationship represents the business connection between
two business partners
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners
Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners
The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role
A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories
In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round
In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
One way BP relationship Category
ndash Eg Is employee of
ndash Eg Has employer
Undirected BP relationship categories
ndash Eg Is married to
Configuration
ndash Extend and define relationship categories
ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extensibility
Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes
Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)
Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname
Extension of the relationships by adding attributes
You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships
ndash Is a member of (club)
ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)
ndash Is the sondaughter of
Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 6
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structures of Business Transactions on SAP GUI
The screenshot shows the typical User Interface (UI) of a transaction in the ldquoSalesrdquo area
SAP AG 2004
Structure of Business Transactions on SAP GUI
Locator Work Area
Toolbar
Item list
Item details
Header details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
SAP CRM Overview ndash Master Data
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 8
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Module Objectives At the completion of this module you should be able to
ndash Explain CRM Master and Transaction Data
ndash Organizational Data -
Objects and Features
Explain Org Model scenarios and attributes
Organizational Data Determination
ndash Business Partner
Category
Relationship
Roles
Extension
ndash Product
Type
Hierarchies
Relationship
Extension
Exchange of Product between R3 and CRM
ndash Partner Product Range
ndash Maintain products and enhance products in CRM
ndash Explain product hierarchies and categories
ndash Understand product data exchange between CRM and R3 backend
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 9
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Master data in SAP CRM
Master Data Transaction
Organizational Data PPOSA_CRMPPOMA_CRM
Business Partner and Hierarchy BP BPH
Product and Hierarchy COMMPR01 COMM_HIERARCHY
Partner Product Range CRMM_PPR
Pricing and Condition SAPCNDGCM
Price List BEACNPL02
Commodity Pricing CRMM_FA_GCM
Content Management CRM_KW
Payment Card PCA
Installed Base IB52
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 10
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Transaction Data
Transactional Data Transaction
Activities CRMD_BUS2000126
Marketing CRM_MKTPL
Leads CRMD_BUS2000108
Opportunities CRMD_BUS2000111
Sales Contract CRMD_BUS2000121
Sales Order CRMD_BUS2000115
Service Process CRMD_BUS2000116
Service Confirmation CRMD_BUS2000117
Service Contract CRMD_BUS2000112
Complaints CRMD_BUS2000120
Billing Document BEA_BD_01
Sales and Service Quotation Contract Order Service Confirmation
CRMD_ORDERCIC0
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Organizational Data
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 12
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Data ndash Objects and Feature Organizational data defines the companyrsquos functional organizational structure in CRM
Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational data is comprised of 2 objects namely
ndash Organizational Unit ndash Functional Unit of the organization like Departments groups project teams
ndash Positions ndash The performer of the task like Sales Manager
Feature of Organizational data
ndash Flexible The organizational units are not already specified you can make your own units or leave some units out
ndash Time dependent This enables you to plan organizational changes in the future you can maintain different organizational structures for different time periods in parallel that means you can plan changes in future
ndash Adaptable and extendable you can maintain and change the organizational plan at any time without making changes in Customizing
ndash One structure for sales and service This can be changed just by activation An organizational unit can be a sales organization and service organization at the same time Scenario-specific data in the structure is assigned to the organizational units with attributes
ndash Organizational units can take the role of a business partner
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams
Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India
Org Unit
India South
Office Chennai
Sales org
Sales office
Positions
Emp group 1
Test lead
Ram Sharma
Position
Holder
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational scenarios
Sales Org Service Marketing
Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid
In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario
You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Attributes
They are used to define the type of an organizational unit
For example
Sales Organization
Sales Office
Sales Group
Service Organization
They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit
For example
Country
Division
Distribution Channel
Postal Code
Organizational Attributes General Attributes
Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining
organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type
ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document
ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Settings for organizational data at item level
Organizational data at Item level
Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product
With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header
There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)
Settings in customizing
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Business Partner
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Category
Person GroupOrganization
A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range
Can be External or Internal
Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings
BP Roles
A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data
Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once
1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc
Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship
Organization Person
Has contact person
Is contact person of
Relationship Attributes
Communication data
Function Department
Employeeresponsible
Can be time dependent
A business partner relationship represents the business connection between
two business partners
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners
Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners
The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role
A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories
In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round
In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
One way BP relationship Category
ndash Eg Is employee of
ndash Eg Has employer
Undirected BP relationship categories
ndash Eg Is married to
Configuration
ndash Extend and define relationship categories
ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extensibility
Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes
Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)
Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname
Extension of the relationships by adding attributes
You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships
ndash Is a member of (club)
ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)
ndash Is the sondaughter of
Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
SAP CRM Overview ndash Master Data
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 8
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Module Objectives At the completion of this module you should be able to
ndash Explain CRM Master and Transaction Data
ndash Organizational Data -
Objects and Features
Explain Org Model scenarios and attributes
Organizational Data Determination
ndash Business Partner
Category
Relationship
Roles
Extension
ndash Product
Type
Hierarchies
Relationship
Extension
Exchange of Product between R3 and CRM
ndash Partner Product Range
ndash Maintain products and enhance products in CRM
ndash Explain product hierarchies and categories
ndash Understand product data exchange between CRM and R3 backend
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 9
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Master data in SAP CRM
Master Data Transaction
Organizational Data PPOSA_CRMPPOMA_CRM
Business Partner and Hierarchy BP BPH
Product and Hierarchy COMMPR01 COMM_HIERARCHY
Partner Product Range CRMM_PPR
Pricing and Condition SAPCNDGCM
Price List BEACNPL02
Commodity Pricing CRMM_FA_GCM
Content Management CRM_KW
Payment Card PCA
Installed Base IB52
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 10
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Transaction Data
Transactional Data Transaction
Activities CRMD_BUS2000126
Marketing CRM_MKTPL
Leads CRMD_BUS2000108
Opportunities CRMD_BUS2000111
Sales Contract CRMD_BUS2000121
Sales Order CRMD_BUS2000115
Service Process CRMD_BUS2000116
Service Confirmation CRMD_BUS2000117
Service Contract CRMD_BUS2000112
Complaints CRMD_BUS2000120
Billing Document BEA_BD_01
Sales and Service Quotation Contract Order Service Confirmation
CRMD_ORDERCIC0
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Organizational Data
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 12
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Data ndash Objects and Feature Organizational data defines the companyrsquos functional organizational structure in CRM
Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational data is comprised of 2 objects namely
ndash Organizational Unit ndash Functional Unit of the organization like Departments groups project teams
ndash Positions ndash The performer of the task like Sales Manager
Feature of Organizational data
ndash Flexible The organizational units are not already specified you can make your own units or leave some units out
ndash Time dependent This enables you to plan organizational changes in the future you can maintain different organizational structures for different time periods in parallel that means you can plan changes in future
ndash Adaptable and extendable you can maintain and change the organizational plan at any time without making changes in Customizing
ndash One structure for sales and service This can be changed just by activation An organizational unit can be a sales organization and service organization at the same time Scenario-specific data in the structure is assigned to the organizational units with attributes
ndash Organizational units can take the role of a business partner
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams
Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India
Org Unit
India South
Office Chennai
Sales org
Sales office
Positions
Emp group 1
Test lead
Ram Sharma
Position
Holder
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational scenarios
Sales Org Service Marketing
Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid
In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario
You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Attributes
They are used to define the type of an organizational unit
For example
Sales Organization
Sales Office
Sales Group
Service Organization
They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit
For example
Country
Division
Distribution Channel
Postal Code
Organizational Attributes General Attributes
Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining
organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type
ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document
ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Settings for organizational data at item level
Organizational data at Item level
Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product
With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header
There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)
Settings in customizing
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Business Partner
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Category
Person GroupOrganization
A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range
Can be External or Internal
Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings
BP Roles
A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data
Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once
1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc
Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship
Organization Person
Has contact person
Is contact person of
Relationship Attributes
Communication data
Function Department
Employeeresponsible
Can be time dependent
A business partner relationship represents the business connection between
two business partners
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners
Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners
The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role
A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories
In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round
In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
One way BP relationship Category
ndash Eg Is employee of
ndash Eg Has employer
Undirected BP relationship categories
ndash Eg Is married to
Configuration
ndash Extend and define relationship categories
ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extensibility
Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes
Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)
Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname
Extension of the relationships by adding attributes
You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships
ndash Is a member of (club)
ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)
ndash Is the sondaughter of
Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 8
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Module Objectives At the completion of this module you should be able to
ndash Explain CRM Master and Transaction Data
ndash Organizational Data -
Objects and Features
Explain Org Model scenarios and attributes
Organizational Data Determination
ndash Business Partner
Category
Relationship
Roles
Extension
ndash Product
Type
Hierarchies
Relationship
Extension
Exchange of Product between R3 and CRM
ndash Partner Product Range
ndash Maintain products and enhance products in CRM
ndash Explain product hierarchies and categories
ndash Understand product data exchange between CRM and R3 backend
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 9
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Master data in SAP CRM
Master Data Transaction
Organizational Data PPOSA_CRMPPOMA_CRM
Business Partner and Hierarchy BP BPH
Product and Hierarchy COMMPR01 COMM_HIERARCHY
Partner Product Range CRMM_PPR
Pricing and Condition SAPCNDGCM
Price List BEACNPL02
Commodity Pricing CRMM_FA_GCM
Content Management CRM_KW
Payment Card PCA
Installed Base IB52
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 10
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Transaction Data
Transactional Data Transaction
Activities CRMD_BUS2000126
Marketing CRM_MKTPL
Leads CRMD_BUS2000108
Opportunities CRMD_BUS2000111
Sales Contract CRMD_BUS2000121
Sales Order CRMD_BUS2000115
Service Process CRMD_BUS2000116
Service Confirmation CRMD_BUS2000117
Service Contract CRMD_BUS2000112
Complaints CRMD_BUS2000120
Billing Document BEA_BD_01
Sales and Service Quotation Contract Order Service Confirmation
CRMD_ORDERCIC0
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Organizational Data
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 12
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Data ndash Objects and Feature Organizational data defines the companyrsquos functional organizational structure in CRM
Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational data is comprised of 2 objects namely
ndash Organizational Unit ndash Functional Unit of the organization like Departments groups project teams
ndash Positions ndash The performer of the task like Sales Manager
Feature of Organizational data
ndash Flexible The organizational units are not already specified you can make your own units or leave some units out
ndash Time dependent This enables you to plan organizational changes in the future you can maintain different organizational structures for different time periods in parallel that means you can plan changes in future
ndash Adaptable and extendable you can maintain and change the organizational plan at any time without making changes in Customizing
ndash One structure for sales and service This can be changed just by activation An organizational unit can be a sales organization and service organization at the same time Scenario-specific data in the structure is assigned to the organizational units with attributes
ndash Organizational units can take the role of a business partner
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams
Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India
Org Unit
India South
Office Chennai
Sales org
Sales office
Positions
Emp group 1
Test lead
Ram Sharma
Position
Holder
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational scenarios
Sales Org Service Marketing
Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid
In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario
You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Attributes
They are used to define the type of an organizational unit
For example
Sales Organization
Sales Office
Sales Group
Service Organization
They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit
For example
Country
Division
Distribution Channel
Postal Code
Organizational Attributes General Attributes
Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining
organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type
ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document
ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Settings for organizational data at item level
Organizational data at Item level
Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product
With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header
There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)
Settings in customizing
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Business Partner
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Category
Person GroupOrganization
A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range
Can be External or Internal
Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings
BP Roles
A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data
Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once
1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc
Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship
Organization Person
Has contact person
Is contact person of
Relationship Attributes
Communication data
Function Department
Employeeresponsible
Can be time dependent
A business partner relationship represents the business connection between
two business partners
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners
Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners
The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role
A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories
In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round
In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
One way BP relationship Category
ndash Eg Is employee of
ndash Eg Has employer
Undirected BP relationship categories
ndash Eg Is married to
Configuration
ndash Extend and define relationship categories
ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extensibility
Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes
Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)
Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname
Extension of the relationships by adding attributes
You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships
ndash Is a member of (club)
ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)
ndash Is the sondaughter of
Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 9
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Master data in SAP CRM
Master Data Transaction
Organizational Data PPOSA_CRMPPOMA_CRM
Business Partner and Hierarchy BP BPH
Product and Hierarchy COMMPR01 COMM_HIERARCHY
Partner Product Range CRMM_PPR
Pricing and Condition SAPCNDGCM
Price List BEACNPL02
Commodity Pricing CRMM_FA_GCM
Content Management CRM_KW
Payment Card PCA
Installed Base IB52
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 10
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Transaction Data
Transactional Data Transaction
Activities CRMD_BUS2000126
Marketing CRM_MKTPL
Leads CRMD_BUS2000108
Opportunities CRMD_BUS2000111
Sales Contract CRMD_BUS2000121
Sales Order CRMD_BUS2000115
Service Process CRMD_BUS2000116
Service Confirmation CRMD_BUS2000117
Service Contract CRMD_BUS2000112
Complaints CRMD_BUS2000120
Billing Document BEA_BD_01
Sales and Service Quotation Contract Order Service Confirmation
CRMD_ORDERCIC0
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Organizational Data
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 12
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Data ndash Objects and Feature Organizational data defines the companyrsquos functional organizational structure in CRM
Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational data is comprised of 2 objects namely
ndash Organizational Unit ndash Functional Unit of the organization like Departments groups project teams
ndash Positions ndash The performer of the task like Sales Manager
Feature of Organizational data
ndash Flexible The organizational units are not already specified you can make your own units or leave some units out
ndash Time dependent This enables you to plan organizational changes in the future you can maintain different organizational structures for different time periods in parallel that means you can plan changes in future
ndash Adaptable and extendable you can maintain and change the organizational plan at any time without making changes in Customizing
ndash One structure for sales and service This can be changed just by activation An organizational unit can be a sales organization and service organization at the same time Scenario-specific data in the structure is assigned to the organizational units with attributes
ndash Organizational units can take the role of a business partner
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams
Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India
Org Unit
India South
Office Chennai
Sales org
Sales office
Positions
Emp group 1
Test lead
Ram Sharma
Position
Holder
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational scenarios
Sales Org Service Marketing
Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid
In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario
You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Attributes
They are used to define the type of an organizational unit
For example
Sales Organization
Sales Office
Sales Group
Service Organization
They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit
For example
Country
Division
Distribution Channel
Postal Code
Organizational Attributes General Attributes
Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining
organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type
ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document
ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Settings for organizational data at item level
Organizational data at Item level
Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product
With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header
There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)
Settings in customizing
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Business Partner
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Category
Person GroupOrganization
A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range
Can be External or Internal
Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings
BP Roles
A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data
Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once
1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc
Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship
Organization Person
Has contact person
Is contact person of
Relationship Attributes
Communication data
Function Department
Employeeresponsible
Can be time dependent
A business partner relationship represents the business connection between
two business partners
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners
Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners
The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role
A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories
In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round
In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
One way BP relationship Category
ndash Eg Is employee of
ndash Eg Has employer
Undirected BP relationship categories
ndash Eg Is married to
Configuration
ndash Extend and define relationship categories
ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extensibility
Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes
Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)
Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname
Extension of the relationships by adding attributes
You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships
ndash Is a member of (club)
ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)
ndash Is the sondaughter of
Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 10
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Transaction Data
Transactional Data Transaction
Activities CRMD_BUS2000126
Marketing CRM_MKTPL
Leads CRMD_BUS2000108
Opportunities CRMD_BUS2000111
Sales Contract CRMD_BUS2000121
Sales Order CRMD_BUS2000115
Service Process CRMD_BUS2000116
Service Confirmation CRMD_BUS2000117
Service Contract CRMD_BUS2000112
Complaints CRMD_BUS2000120
Billing Document BEA_BD_01
Sales and Service Quotation Contract Order Service Confirmation
CRMD_ORDERCIC0
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Organizational Data
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 12
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Data ndash Objects and Feature Organizational data defines the companyrsquos functional organizational structure in CRM
Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational data is comprised of 2 objects namely
ndash Organizational Unit ndash Functional Unit of the organization like Departments groups project teams
ndash Positions ndash The performer of the task like Sales Manager
Feature of Organizational data
ndash Flexible The organizational units are not already specified you can make your own units or leave some units out
ndash Time dependent This enables you to plan organizational changes in the future you can maintain different organizational structures for different time periods in parallel that means you can plan changes in future
ndash Adaptable and extendable you can maintain and change the organizational plan at any time without making changes in Customizing
ndash One structure for sales and service This can be changed just by activation An organizational unit can be a sales organization and service organization at the same time Scenario-specific data in the structure is assigned to the organizational units with attributes
ndash Organizational units can take the role of a business partner
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams
Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India
Org Unit
India South
Office Chennai
Sales org
Sales office
Positions
Emp group 1
Test lead
Ram Sharma
Position
Holder
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational scenarios
Sales Org Service Marketing
Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid
In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario
You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Attributes
They are used to define the type of an organizational unit
For example
Sales Organization
Sales Office
Sales Group
Service Organization
They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit
For example
Country
Division
Distribution Channel
Postal Code
Organizational Attributes General Attributes
Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining
organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type
ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document
ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Settings for organizational data at item level
Organizational data at Item level
Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product
With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header
There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)
Settings in customizing
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Business Partner
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Category
Person GroupOrganization
A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range
Can be External or Internal
Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings
BP Roles
A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data
Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once
1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc
Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship
Organization Person
Has contact person
Is contact person of
Relationship Attributes
Communication data
Function Department
Employeeresponsible
Can be time dependent
A business partner relationship represents the business connection between
two business partners
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners
Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners
The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role
A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories
In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round
In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
One way BP relationship Category
ndash Eg Is employee of
ndash Eg Has employer
Undirected BP relationship categories
ndash Eg Is married to
Configuration
ndash Extend and define relationship categories
ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extensibility
Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes
Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)
Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname
Extension of the relationships by adding attributes
You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships
ndash Is a member of (club)
ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)
ndash Is the sondaughter of
Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Organizational Data
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 12
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Data ndash Objects and Feature Organizational data defines the companyrsquos functional organizational structure in CRM
Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational data is comprised of 2 objects namely
ndash Organizational Unit ndash Functional Unit of the organization like Departments groups project teams
ndash Positions ndash The performer of the task like Sales Manager
Feature of Organizational data
ndash Flexible The organizational units are not already specified you can make your own units or leave some units out
ndash Time dependent This enables you to plan organizational changes in the future you can maintain different organizational structures for different time periods in parallel that means you can plan changes in future
ndash Adaptable and extendable you can maintain and change the organizational plan at any time without making changes in Customizing
ndash One structure for sales and service This can be changed just by activation An organizational unit can be a sales organization and service organization at the same time Scenario-specific data in the structure is assigned to the organizational units with attributes
ndash Organizational units can take the role of a business partner
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams
Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India
Org Unit
India South
Office Chennai
Sales org
Sales office
Positions
Emp group 1
Test lead
Ram Sharma
Position
Holder
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational scenarios
Sales Org Service Marketing
Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid
In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario
You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Attributes
They are used to define the type of an organizational unit
For example
Sales Organization
Sales Office
Sales Group
Service Organization
They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit
For example
Country
Division
Distribution Channel
Postal Code
Organizational Attributes General Attributes
Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining
organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type
ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document
ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Settings for organizational data at item level
Organizational data at Item level
Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product
With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header
There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)
Settings in customizing
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Business Partner
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Category
Person GroupOrganization
A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range
Can be External or Internal
Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings
BP Roles
A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data
Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once
1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc
Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship
Organization Person
Has contact person
Is contact person of
Relationship Attributes
Communication data
Function Department
Employeeresponsible
Can be time dependent
A business partner relationship represents the business connection between
two business partners
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners
Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners
The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role
A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories
In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round
In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
One way BP relationship Category
ndash Eg Is employee of
ndash Eg Has employer
Undirected BP relationship categories
ndash Eg Is married to
Configuration
ndash Extend and define relationship categories
ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extensibility
Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes
Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)
Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname
Extension of the relationships by adding attributes
You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships
ndash Is a member of (club)
ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)
ndash Is the sondaughter of
Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 12
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Data ndash Objects and Feature Organizational data defines the companyrsquos functional organizational structure in CRM
Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational data is comprised of 2 objects namely
ndash Organizational Unit ndash Functional Unit of the organization like Departments groups project teams
ndash Positions ndash The performer of the task like Sales Manager
Feature of Organizational data
ndash Flexible The organizational units are not already specified you can make your own units or leave some units out
ndash Time dependent This enables you to plan organizational changes in the future you can maintain different organizational structures for different time periods in parallel that means you can plan changes in future
ndash Adaptable and extendable you can maintain and change the organizational plan at any time without making changes in Customizing
ndash One structure for sales and service This can be changed just by activation An organizational unit can be a sales organization and service organization at the same time Scenario-specific data in the structure is assigned to the organizational units with attributes
ndash Organizational units can take the role of a business partner
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams
Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India
Org Unit
India South
Office Chennai
Sales org
Sales office
Positions
Emp group 1
Test lead
Ram Sharma
Position
Holder
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational scenarios
Sales Org Service Marketing
Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid
In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario
You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Attributes
They are used to define the type of an organizational unit
For example
Sales Organization
Sales Office
Sales Group
Service Organization
They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit
For example
Country
Division
Distribution Channel
Postal Code
Organizational Attributes General Attributes
Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining
organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type
ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document
ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Settings for organizational data at item level
Organizational data at Item level
Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product
With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header
There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)
Settings in customizing
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Business Partner
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Category
Person GroupOrganization
A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range
Can be External or Internal
Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings
BP Roles
A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data
Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once
1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc
Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship
Organization Person
Has contact person
Is contact person of
Relationship Attributes
Communication data
Function Department
Employeeresponsible
Can be time dependent
A business partner relationship represents the business connection between
two business partners
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners
Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners
The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role
A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories
In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round
In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
One way BP relationship Category
ndash Eg Is employee of
ndash Eg Has employer
Undirected BP relationship categories
ndash Eg Is married to
Configuration
ndash Extend and define relationship categories
ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extensibility
Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes
Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)
Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname
Extension of the relationships by adding attributes
You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships
ndash Is a member of (club)
ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)
ndash Is the sondaughter of
Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan
Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams
Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India
Org Unit
India South
Office Chennai
Sales org
Sales office
Positions
Emp group 1
Test lead
Ram Sharma
Position
Holder
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational scenarios
Sales Org Service Marketing
Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid
In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario
You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Attributes
They are used to define the type of an organizational unit
For example
Sales Organization
Sales Office
Sales Group
Service Organization
They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit
For example
Country
Division
Distribution Channel
Postal Code
Organizational Attributes General Attributes
Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining
organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type
ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document
ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Settings for organizational data at item level
Organizational data at Item level
Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product
With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header
There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)
Settings in customizing
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Business Partner
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Category
Person GroupOrganization
A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range
Can be External or Internal
Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings
BP Roles
A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data
Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once
1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc
Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship
Organization Person
Has contact person
Is contact person of
Relationship Attributes
Communication data
Function Department
Employeeresponsible
Can be time dependent
A business partner relationship represents the business connection between
two business partners
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners
Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners
The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role
A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories
In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round
In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
One way BP relationship Category
ndash Eg Is employee of
ndash Eg Has employer
Undirected BP relationship categories
ndash Eg Is married to
Configuration
ndash Extend and define relationship categories
ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extensibility
Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes
Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)
Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname
Extension of the relationships by adding attributes
You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships
ndash Is a member of (club)
ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)
ndash Is the sondaughter of
Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational scenarios
Sales Org Service Marketing
Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid
In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario
You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Attributes
They are used to define the type of an organizational unit
For example
Sales Organization
Sales Office
Sales Group
Service Organization
They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit
For example
Country
Division
Distribution Channel
Postal Code
Organizational Attributes General Attributes
Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining
organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type
ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document
ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Settings for organizational data at item level
Organizational data at Item level
Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product
With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header
There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)
Settings in customizing
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Business Partner
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Category
Person GroupOrganization
A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range
Can be External or Internal
Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings
BP Roles
A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data
Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once
1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc
Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship
Organization Person
Has contact person
Is contact person of
Relationship Attributes
Communication data
Function Department
Employeeresponsible
Can be time dependent
A business partner relationship represents the business connection between
two business partners
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners
Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners
The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role
A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories
In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round
In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
One way BP relationship Category
ndash Eg Is employee of
ndash Eg Has employer
Undirected BP relationship categories
ndash Eg Is married to
Configuration
ndash Extend and define relationship categories
ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extensibility
Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes
Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)
Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname
Extension of the relationships by adding attributes
You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships
ndash Is a member of (club)
ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)
ndash Is the sondaughter of
Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Organizational Attributes
They are used to define the type of an organizational unit
For example
Sales Organization
Sales Office
Sales Group
Service Organization
They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit
For example
Country
Division
Distribution Channel
Postal Code
Organizational Attributes General Attributes
Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining
organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type
ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document
ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Settings for organizational data at item level
Organizational data at Item level
Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product
With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header
There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)
Settings in customizing
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Business Partner
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Category
Person GroupOrganization
A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range
Can be External or Internal
Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings
BP Roles
A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data
Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once
1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc
Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship
Organization Person
Has contact person
Is contact person of
Relationship Attributes
Communication data
Function Department
Employeeresponsible
Can be time dependent
A business partner relationship represents the business connection between
two business partners
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners
Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners
The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role
A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories
In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round
In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
One way BP relationship Category
ndash Eg Is employee of
ndash Eg Has employer
Undirected BP relationship categories
ndash Eg Is married to
Configuration
ndash Extend and define relationship categories
ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extensibility
Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes
Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)
Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname
Extension of the relationships by adding attributes
You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships
ndash Is a member of (club)
ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)
ndash Is the sondaughter of
Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining
organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type
ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document
ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Settings for organizational data at item level
Organizational data at Item level
Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product
With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header
There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)
Settings in customizing
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Business Partner
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Category
Person GroupOrganization
A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range
Can be External or Internal
Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings
BP Roles
A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data
Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once
1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc
Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship
Organization Person
Has contact person
Is contact person of
Relationship Attributes
Communication data
Function Department
Employeeresponsible
Can be time dependent
A business partner relationship represents the business connection between
two business partners
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners
Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners
The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role
A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories
In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round
In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
One way BP relationship Category
ndash Eg Is employee of
ndash Eg Has employer
Undirected BP relationship categories
ndash Eg Is married to
Configuration
ndash Extend and define relationship categories
ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extensibility
Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes
Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)
Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname
Extension of the relationships by adding attributes
You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships
ndash Is a member of (club)
ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)
ndash Is the sondaughter of
Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Settings for organizational data at item level
Organizational data at Item level
Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product
With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header
There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)
Settings in customizing
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category
Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Business Partner
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Category
Person GroupOrganization
A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range
Can be External or Internal
Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings
BP Roles
A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data
Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once
1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc
Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship
Organization Person
Has contact person
Is contact person of
Relationship Attributes
Communication data
Function Department
Employeeresponsible
Can be time dependent
A business partner relationship represents the business connection between
two business partners
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners
Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners
The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role
A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories
In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round
In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
One way BP relationship Category
ndash Eg Is employee of
ndash Eg Has employer
Undirected BP relationship categories
ndash Eg Is married to
Configuration
ndash Extend and define relationship categories
ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extensibility
Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes
Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)
Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname
Extension of the relationships by adding attributes
You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships
ndash Is a member of (club)
ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)
ndash Is the sondaughter of
Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Business Partner
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Category
Person GroupOrganization
A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range
Can be External or Internal
Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings
BP Roles
A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data
Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once
1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc
Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship
Organization Person
Has contact person
Is contact person of
Relationship Attributes
Communication data
Function Department
Employeeresponsible
Can be time dependent
A business partner relationship represents the business connection between
two business partners
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners
Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners
The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role
A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories
In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round
In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
One way BP relationship Category
ndash Eg Is employee of
ndash Eg Has employer
Undirected BP relationship categories
ndash Eg Is married to
Configuration
ndash Extend and define relationship categories
ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extensibility
Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes
Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)
Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname
Extension of the relationships by adding attributes
You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships
ndash Is a member of (club)
ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)
ndash Is the sondaughter of
Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Category
Person GroupOrganization
A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range
Can be External or Internal
Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings
BP Roles
A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data
Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once
1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc
Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship
Organization Person
Has contact person
Is contact person of
Relationship Attributes
Communication data
Function Department
Employeeresponsible
Can be time dependent
A business partner relationship represents the business connection between
two business partners
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners
Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners
The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role
A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories
In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round
In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
One way BP relationship Category
ndash Eg Is employee of
ndash Eg Has employer
Undirected BP relationship categories
ndash Eg Is married to
Configuration
ndash Extend and define relationship categories
ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extensibility
Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes
Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)
Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname
Extension of the relationships by adding attributes
You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships
ndash Is a member of (club)
ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)
ndash Is the sondaughter of
Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range
Can be External or Internal
Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings
BP Roles
A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data
Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once
1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc
Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship
Organization Person
Has contact person
Is contact person of
Relationship Attributes
Communication data
Function Department
Employeeresponsible
Can be time dependent
A business partner relationship represents the business connection between
two business partners
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners
Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners
The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role
A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories
In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round
In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
One way BP relationship Category
ndash Eg Is employee of
ndash Eg Has employer
Undirected BP relationship categories
ndash Eg Is married to
Configuration
ndash Extend and define relationship categories
ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extensibility
Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes
Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)
Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname
Extension of the relationships by adding attributes
You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships
ndash Is a member of (club)
ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)
ndash Is the sondaughter of
Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship
Organization Person
Has contact person
Is contact person of
Relationship Attributes
Communication data
Function Department
Employeeresponsible
Can be time dependent
A business partner relationship represents the business connection between
two business partners
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners
Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners
The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role
A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories
In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round
In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
One way BP relationship Category
ndash Eg Is employee of
ndash Eg Has employer
Undirected BP relationship categories
ndash Eg Is married to
Configuration
ndash Extend and define relationship categories
ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extensibility
Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes
Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)
Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname
Extension of the relationships by adding attributes
You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships
ndash Is a member of (club)
ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)
ndash Is the sondaughter of
Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners
Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners
The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role
A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories
In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round
In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
One way BP relationship Category
ndash Eg Is employee of
ndash Eg Has employer
Undirected BP relationship categories
ndash Eg Is married to
Configuration
ndash Extend and define relationship categories
ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extensibility
Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes
Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)
Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname
Extension of the relationships by adding attributes
You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships
ndash Is a member of (club)
ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)
ndash Is the sondaughter of
Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Relationship Category
One way BP relationship Category
ndash Eg Is employee of
ndash Eg Has employer
Undirected BP relationship categories
ndash Eg Is married to
Configuration
ndash Extend and define relationship categories
ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extensibility
Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes
Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)
Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname
Extension of the relationships by adding attributes
You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships
ndash Is a member of (club)
ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)
ndash Is the sondaughter of
Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extensibility
Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes
Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)
Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname
Extension of the relationships by adding attributes
You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships
ndash Is a member of (club)
ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)
ndash Is the sondaughter of
Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 2
Level 3 Level 3BP 010
BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050
bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc
Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
BP Extension
Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)
New fields and tables can be added
Easy and effiecient
Wizard for user guidance
Retains results in case of SAP upgrades
Business Data Toolset
Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP
Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)
VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Product Master
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
[Product Master] Agenda
Business Scenario
Product Types
Structure of CRM Product master
Maintaining Products
Inactive Products
Relationships
Hierarchy and Categories
Enhancing Product master
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Download of CRM Product data from R3
Competitor Products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Types
CRM Product master has the following product types
ndash Material
ndash Service
ndash Warranty
ndash Financing
ndash Financial Service
ndash Intellectual Property (IP)
Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold
Warranty information is created with respect to product
IP is available for media industry
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Structure of CRM Product master
SAP Basic data
ndash Product categories
ndash Basic texts
ndash Status
Sales and Distribution
ndash Distribution channel
ndash Sales
Other views
New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Products
Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive
Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)
Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted
Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3
Structured products can be created and downloaded
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Inactive Products
Inconsistent products are made inactive
Collective processing can be done to make products active
Inactive products can be deleted
Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship
Other relationships
ndash Customers
ndash Financed by
ndash Content provider
ndash Indemnity payment
ndash Vendors
ndash Components
ndash Warranty
Competitor Product Lean product master
Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions
Derived relationships
ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product
ndash Customer -gt competitor product
ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product
Available only in PCUI
Has accessories
Customers
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements
A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes
Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master
Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy
Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories
R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)
R3MATCLASS
R3PRODHIER
SAP R3 SAP CRM
Material Type
Material Group
Product Hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchies and Categories(2)
Hierarchy nodesSoftware
HardwareDesktop
Laptop
Printers
Categories
Sub-Categories
bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708
Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Product Category
If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object
To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies
ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type
ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Enhancing the Product master
Categories
ProductSoftware
HardwareDesktopLaptop
MonitorMonitor
characteristics
Hierarchies Set types
Color
Type
Size
Attributes
Creating the product master is done in the following steps
1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3
Download of Product data from R3
Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this
Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM
Upload of CRM Product data into R3
Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type
Upload is carried out manually for each product
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
IBase
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types
Installed Base
Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Components
The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported
Partners
Address
Documents
Qualification
Warranty
Counter
Qualification
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Objects
Individual Objects enable you
To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process
Object history
Partner history
Attribute configuration history
Business document history
Object structure
Relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product
Attribute set types
Relationships
Document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product
Contains information on the features of goods or service
It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12
Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex
ndash ID number
ndash Location
ndash Address
Object families
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
IndividualObject
Attributes- describing the
associated Individual objectsas Individual fields
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object - Integration
Service Order Integration
ndash Complaints
ndash In-house repairs
ndash Service order amp confirmation
ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base
ndash Case management
Channel Integration
ndash E-Service Integration
Product Self-registration
ndash Field Applications
Mobile Service
ndash Interaction Centre
Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Installed Base Customizing steps
IBase Category
ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
ndash Assign user status profile
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status
ndash Permitted component types
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types
ndash Assign Partner determination procedure
Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category
Customer-specific component types
ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Individual Object Customizing Setting
1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families
2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories
3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require
4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type
5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type
6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category
7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings
8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials
9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Counter Customizing steps
1 Maintain Counter attributes
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes
2 Maintain Counter Categories
IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories
3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category
IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Set the checkmarks
Display Counter
Display Reading
One tab page
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
PPR
Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data
Date
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR ndash Partner Product Range
Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time
System has the feature to include or exclude the combination
System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination
CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
PPR contd
Header data
Item data
Item details
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
Exercises
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Maintaining Org Model
Maintaining Org Model
ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units
ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units
ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these
ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units
Maintaining Attributes
ndash You maintain important data like address validity period
ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group
ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM
Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it
Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)
Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes
You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Hierarchy Maintenance
Creating Hierarchies
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings
Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears
Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed
If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Category Maintenance
Creating Product Categories
In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears
Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area
Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category
Enter a category ID and description
If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category
Enter data as required
Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view
Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types
Save your data
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56
IBM Global Business Services
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
Exercise on User-Exit and BADI
1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)
Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup
2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)
When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU
copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009
IBM Global Business Services
THANK YOU